User manual - EXH50_ZS200_M29_FA

ManualsBrandsCasio ManualsDigital CameraEX-ZS200

ﯽﻟﺎﺘﻴﺠﻳﺩ ﻦﻴﺑﺭﻭﺩ

.ﻢﻳﺭﺍﺰﮕﺳﺎﭙﺳ

CASIO

ﻝﻮﺼﺤﻣ ﻦﻳﺍ ﺪﻳﺮﺧ ﺮﻃﺎﺧ ﻪﺑ ﺎﻤﺷ ﺯﺍ

•.ﺪﻴﻨﮐ ﻪﻌﻟﺎﻄﻣ ﺍﺭ ﺮﺑﺭﺎﮐ یﺎﻤﻨﻫﺍﺭ ﻦﻳﺍ ﺭﺩ ﺩﻮﺟﻮﻣ ﯽﻨﻤﻳﺍ ﺮﻴﺑﺍﺪﺗ ﺎﻤﺘﺣ ،ﻩﺎﮕﺘﺳﺩ ﺯﺍ ﻩﺩﺎﻔﺘﺳﺍ ﺯﺍ ﻞﺒﻗ

• .ﺪﻴﻨﮐ یﺭﺍﺪﻬﮕﻧ ﯽﻨﻣﺍ ﻥﺎﮑﻣ ﺭﺩ یﺪﻌﺑ ﺕﺎﻌﺟﺍﺮﻣ یﺍﺮﺑ ﺍﺭ ﺮﺑﺭﺎﮐ یﺎﻤﻨﻫﺍﺭ

• ﺭﺩ

EXILIM

ﯽﻤﺳﺭ ﺖﻳﺎﺳ ﺏﻭ ﺯﺍ ،ﻝﻮﺼﺤﻣ ﻦﻳﺍ ﻪﺑ ﻁﻮﺑﺮﻣ ﺕﺎﻋﻼﻃﺍ ﻦﻳﺮﺗﺪﻳﺪﺟ ﻪﺑ ﯽﺳﺮﺘﺳﺩ یﺍﺮﺑ

ﺪﻴﻳﺎﻤﻧ ﺪﻳﺩﺯﺎﺑ

http://www.exilim.com/

ﺮﺑﺭﺎﮐ یﺎﻤﻨﻫﺍﺭ

Summary of content (130 pages)

PAGE 1
‫‪Pr‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﻃﺮ ﺧﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ‪ CASIO‬ﺳﭙﺎﺳﮕﺰﺍﺭﻳﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻤﺎ ﺗﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺩﺭ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺍﻣﻨﯽ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻭﺏ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﺭﺳﻤﯽ ‪ EXILIM‬ﺩﺭ‬ ‫‪ http://www.exilim.
PAGE 2
‫ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﺮ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺒﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻭﺷﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﺤﻠﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻟﻴﺘﻴﻮﻡ ﻳﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﺎﺭژ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﺪﺩ )‪(NP-80‬‬ ‫ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ‬ ‫)‪USB-AC (AD-C53U‬‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫‪USB‬‬ ‫ﺑﺴﺘﻦ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻣﭽﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﻨﺪ ﻣﭽﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫* ﺷﮑﻞ ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﮥ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﮐﺸﻮﺭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺎﻳﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.
PAGE 3
‫ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ!‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍی ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍی ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩی ﻣﺸﮑﻮک ﻳﺎ ﺍﺷﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺮ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﮐﭙﯽ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍی ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﭼﻪ ﺑﺨﺸﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺟﺰ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍی ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ‬ ‫‪ CASIO COMPUTER CO.
PAGE 4
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ‪2..................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ!‪3.................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﻠﯽ ‪8................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻭ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﯽ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ‪9.............................................................
PAGE 5
‫❚❙‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪BEST SHOT‬‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫‪49‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ‪49 .......................................................................... BEST SHOT‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﭘﺮﺗﺮﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ‪) ..........................................................‬ﭘﺮﺗﺮﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ(‪51 .....‬‬ ‫❚❙ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬ ‫‪52‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪52 ..........................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) ....................................................................... REC‬ﺿﺒﻂ(‪54 .....
PAGE 6
‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ‪)......................................................................‬ﺗﮑﺜﻴﺮ(‪77 .....‬‬ ‫ﮐﭙﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‪) ............................................................................‬ﮐﭙﯽ(‪78 .....‬‬ ‫❚❙ ﭼﺎپ‬ ‫‪79‬‬ ‫ﭼﺎپ ﻋﮑﺲ ‪79 ................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪ DPOF‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﭼﺎﭘﯽ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﮐﭙﯽ ﻫﺎ‪79 .........................................
PAGE 7
‫❚❙ ﺿﻤﻴﻤﻪ‬ ‫‪103‬‬ ‫ﺗﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ‪103 ..............................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻬﻢ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‪110 .............................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺑﺮﻕ‪113 .................................................................................................‬‬ ‫❚‬ ‫❚‬ ‫❚‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ‪113 ...............................................................................................
PAGE 8
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﭘﺮﺍﻧﺘﺰ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.
PAGE 9
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻭ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﯽ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻧﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺁﮔﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻗﺼﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺗﯽ‬ ‫ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 10
‫‪ .‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(24‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻓﻼﺵ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(36‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ‪) ISO‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(66‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺮﮐﺰ )ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪(57 ،25‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ‪ ISO‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ )‪ (AE‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﻻﻳﻠﯽ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﺎﺭﻧﺠﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 11
‫‪ .‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫‪12 3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(75‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ‪/‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(92‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(47‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(36‬‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(98‬‬ ‫‪ 7‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(17‬‬ ‫‪) Eye-Fi 8‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(90‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ )‪ [8] (DISP‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) REC‬ﺿﺒﻂ( ﻭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) PLAY‬ﭘﺨﺶ( ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 12
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ‪ CASIO‬ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ‪ CASIO‬ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﺪﺭﺗﻤﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺎ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎی ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﯽ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﻣﻬﻢ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﻤﺎ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﺘﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﺮﻏﻮﺏ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺷﯽء ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪ .‬ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﺮﻏﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻬﺘﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.
PAGE 13
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺎﺯﻩ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﺍﺭی ﺷﺪﻩ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﺎﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻴﺮﻭ ﺑﻪ ‪ CASIO‬ﻳﮏ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻟﻴﺘﻴﻮﻡ ﻳﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ )‪ (NP-80‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺝ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﻴﭽﮕﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﺎﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺟﺎﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 14
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻓﻌﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺎﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ‪USB-AC‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ‪USB-AC‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )‪.
PAGE 15
‫• ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ‪ USB/AV‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺻﺪﺍی ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎی‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﺤﮑﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﮕﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﺠﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﺣﺘﯽ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﮐﺎﻣﻼ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﺎﻥ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻓﻠﺰی ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 16
‫• ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺭی ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﮏ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺧﻄﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻪ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ‪ USB-AC‬ﮐﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎﻳﺒﺮﻧﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 17
‫ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﻧﻴﺮﻭی ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻧﻴﺮﻭی ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﻴﺮﻭی ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﺎﻧﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻴﺮﻭی ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻟﯽ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬ ‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ‬ ‫ﺿﻌﻴﻒ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺁﺑﯽ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﮐﻬﺮﺑﺎﻳﯽ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻫﺮ ﭼﻪ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺘﺮ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﻓﻮﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 18
‫ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺭی ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍی ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﻭ‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﯽ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﮕﻴﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ‬ ‫ﺭﻭی ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺷﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﮑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺯﺍﺭ ژﺍﭘﻦ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﺍﺭی ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ‪ ٢‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .
PAGE 19
‫ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺎﻻ ﺍﺷﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪی ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ‪ :‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪99‬‬ ‫– ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‪ :‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪98‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺮ ﮐﺸﻮﺭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﺤﻠﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺗﺎﺑﺴﺘﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺭی ﮐﻪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻳﺪ ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﮐﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .
PAGE 20
‫ﺟﺎﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪) [ON/OFF‬ﻧﻴﺮﻭ( ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺎﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻮﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﮐﻪ ﺟﻠﻮی ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﻋﻘﺐ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ )ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺖ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺷﮑﺎﻑ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺻﺪﺍی ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﺤﮑﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﺸﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫ﭘﺸﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺟﻠﻮی ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 21
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﻫﺎ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺷﮑﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻘﻴﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﭘﺸﺘﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺳﺒﺰ‬ ‫ﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﻣﯽ ﺯﻧﺪ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻓﻘﻴﺖ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺣﺘﯽ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 22
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫)ﺿﺒﻂ( ﻣﯽ‬ ‫)ﻧﻴﺮﻭ( ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪REC‬‬ ‫)ﺿﺒﻂ( ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ]‪) [p‬ﭘﺨﺶ( ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) PLAY‬ﭘﺨﺶ(‬ ‫ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪.(67 ،28‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ]‪) [p‬ﭘﺨﺶ( ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬ ‫‪) PLAY‬ﭘﺨﺶ( ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 23
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺯﻭی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﭘﻬﻠﻮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻗﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻭ ﮐﻤﯽ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬ ‫ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺭ ﮐﻢ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی‬ ‫ﺍﻫﻤﻴﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻧﻮﺭ ﮐﻢ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.
PAGE 24
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ )ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﺮﻏﻮﺏ( ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﻃﺒﻖ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺳﺎﺯی ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫‪ t‬ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﺮﻏﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺷﯽء ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪ .‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﺮﻏﻮﺏ‪،‬‬ ‫ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻬﺘﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.
PAGE 25
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﻭی ﻋﮑﺲ ﺯﻭﻡ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ w‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺩﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫‪ z‬ﺗﻠﻪ ﻓﻮﺗﻮ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺯﻭﻡ‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﭘﺸﺘﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 26
‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﺎﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﺻﺪﺍی ﺷﺎﺗﺮ )ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪(.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ( ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺷﻮﺩ‪[0] .‬‬ ‫)ﻓﻴﻠﻢ( ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪47‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 27
‫‪ .‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﺮﻏﻮﺏ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﻳﭽﻪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ‪ ،ISO‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺗﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﮑﻪ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻋﺎﺩی ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺁﻥ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 28
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﯽ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 67‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫]‪) [p‬ﭘﺨﺶ( ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬ ‫‪) PLAY‬ﭘﺨﺶ( ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺣﺎﻭی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪.(10‬‬ ‫]‪) [p‬ﭘﺨﺶ(‬ ‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎک ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪.
PAGE 29
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭘﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﻧﻴﺎﺯی ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎک ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) REC‬ﺿﺒﻂ( ﻳﺎ ‪) PLAY‬ﭘﺨﺶ(‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ] [ )ﺣﺬﻑ( ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫]‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫[ )ﺣﺬﻑ(‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﻃﺮ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ )ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺎ ﺻﺪﺍ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ (77‬ﻫﻢ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻭ ﻫﻢ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.
PAGE 30
‫‪ .‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺧﺎﺹ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺯ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ ]‪ [2‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ”ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ“ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ]‪ [SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫]‬ ‫[ )ﺣﺬﻑ( ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﮏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ]‪ [4] ،[2] ،[8‬ﻭ ]‪ [6‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫]‪ [SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺯﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.۴‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ‪ ٣‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﻫﺎ‪) [ ] ،‬ﺣﺬﻑ( ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 31
‫‪ .‬ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺘﻬﺎی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫• ﻫﺮ ﮐﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺑﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺭﺍ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺳﺎﺯﺩ‪.
PAGE 32
‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎی ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻧﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬ ‫‪ t‬ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪.(24‬‬ ‫‪ Ÿ‬ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﺮﻏﻮﺏ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﺮﻏﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺷﯽء‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪ .
PAGE 33
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) REC‬ﺿﺒﻂ(‪ [SET] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ]‪ [2‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ‬ ‫]‪[SET‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫]‪[8] [2] [4] [6‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ ]‪ [2‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪*.
PAGE 34
‫• ﻧﻤﺎﺩی ﺑﺮﺍی ﻫﻴﭻ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ (9‬ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ‬ ‫)ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ( ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻳﮏ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﻓﻼﺵ‪ :‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫– ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬ ‫– ﺁﺭﺍﻳﺶ‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬ ‫– ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬ ‫– ﺑﯽ ﺻﺪﺍ‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬ ‫• ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﺪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪.(52‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ(‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 35
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺯ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ ]‪ ،[2‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ”ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ“ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) REC‬ﺿﺒﻂ(‪ [SET] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪.(33‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ ]‪ [6‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ]‪ [SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 36
‫‪ .‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩی ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺻﺎﻓﯽ ﻭ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﻳﮏ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ )‪ (HD‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺑﻬﺘﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﯽ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺯ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ ]‪ ،[2‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ”ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ“ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) REC‬ﺿﺒﻂ(‪ [SET] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪ [SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪.(33‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 37
‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ ]‪ [6‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ]‪ [SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮی ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ]‪) [2‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ )‪ [8] (DISP‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪.(11‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫> ﻓﻼﺵ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫(‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﻫﻴﭽﮑﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ )ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ( ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫? ﻓﻼﺵ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 38
‫• ﺣﺘﯽ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﮑﻪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺻﺪﺍی ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺩﺭﻳﭽﻪ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻭﺍﮐﻨﺶ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻮی ﻏﻴﺮﻃﺒﻴﻌﯽ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﭼﺮﺑﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺘﺎﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﺎ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺩﺭﻳﭽﻪ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﻗﯽ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺨﺘﯽ ﭘﺎک ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .
PAGE 39
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ )ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ(‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺯ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ ]‪ ،[2‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ”ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ“ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪.(33‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺯ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ ]‪ [6‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ]‪ [SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) REC‬ﺿﺒﻂ(‪ [SET] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 40
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺯﻳﺒﺎﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﭘﺮﺗﺮﻩ )ﺁﺭﺍﻳﺶ(‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺁﺭﺍﻳﺶ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻓﺖ ﭘﻮﺳﺖ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺻﺎﻑ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺛﺮ ﺗﺎﺑﺶ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺯ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ ]‪ ،[2‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ”ﺁﺭﺍﻳﺶ“ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪.(33‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺯ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ ]‪ [6‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ”ﺁﺭﺍﻳﺶ‪ :‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ“ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ]‪ [SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) REC‬ﺿﺒﻂ(‪ [SET] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ‬ ‫‪ ±‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬ ‫½ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬ ‫‪.۴‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺁﺭﺍﻳﺶ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 41
‫ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻧﻮﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ )ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ(‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﺯی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺯ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ ]‪ ،[2‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ”ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ“ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪.(33‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺯ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ ]‪ [6‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ]‪ [SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) REC‬ﺿﺒﻂ(‪ [SET] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .
PAGE 42
‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ ]‪ [6‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ”ﺭﻭﺷﻦ“ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ]‪ [SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﯽ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ‪) m‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﯽ ﺻﺪﺍ( ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﯽ ﺻﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬ ‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬ ‫ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﮐﻤﮑﯽ‬ ‫‪AF‬‬ ‫ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬ ‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 43
‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻫﺮﭼﻪ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻓﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭﺷﺖ ﺗﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﻗﺖ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺁﻧﮑﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺧﺮﺍﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪.(44‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﺭ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﺭﻳﭽﻪ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .
PAGE 44
‫• ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺧﺮﺍﺏ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ .(34‬ﻫﺮ ﭼﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﮐﻮﭼﮑﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺧﺮﺍﺑﯽ‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﻀﯽ ﺯﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﻫﺎی ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺧﺮﺍﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﻁ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ”‪ “10M‬ﻳﺎ ﮐﻮﭼﮑﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﺧﺮﺍﺏ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .
PAGE 45
‫‪.۴‬‬ ‫ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ‪ ART SHOT‬ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ]‪ [SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ‪ :‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺑﺎﺯی‪ ،‬ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻣﻼﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﺎﻳﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎپ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﭙﻴﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﮏ ﺭﻧﮓ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﻨﻴﺎﺗﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﭼﺸﻢ ﻣﺎﻫﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫‪.۵‬‬ ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪ ART SHOT‬ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .
PAGE 46
‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‬ ‫• ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺎ ‪ Windows Media Player‬ﻳﺎ ‪ QuickTime‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‪) WAVE/IMA-ADPCM :‬ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ ‪(WAV‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) PLAY‬ﭘﺨﺶ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ ]‪ [6‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫` ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ( ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 47
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪.(36‬‬ ‫ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) REC‬ﺿﺒﻂ(‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ( ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ(‬ ‫ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(125‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ‪ Y‬ﺑﺮ‬ ‫ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎی ﺗﮏ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 48
‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺕ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﮔﺮﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﮔﺮﻡ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﮐﺎﻣﻼ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﮑﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﮑﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻴﮑﺮﻭﻓﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺘﺎﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺷﯽء ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﻣﺴﺪﻭﺩ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺪ‪.
PAGE 49
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪BEST SHOT‬‬ ‫‪ BEST SHOT‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺍی ﺍﺯ ”ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی“ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺷﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺁﻥ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺧﺮﺍﺏ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﺛﺮ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 50
‫‪.۵‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ‪ [SET] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) REC‬ﺿﺒﻂ( ﺑﺮﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﺍﺯ ‪ ،BEST SHOT‬ﺭﻭﺵ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ‪ ١‬ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.۶‬‬ ‫)ﺍﮔﺮ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﻳﺪ( ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﻳﺎ )ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﻳﺪ( ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ( ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 51
‫• ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ‪ BEST SHOT‬ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺠﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﻭ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻴﺪ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻧﺪﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ‪ BEST SHOT‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﮑﻪ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﺍﺯ ‪ BEST SHOT‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪ BEST SHOT‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪.
PAGE 52
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍی ﻣﻨﻮ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) REC‬ﺿﺒﻂ( ﺑﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍی ﻣﻨﻮ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪PLAY‬‬ ‫)ﭘﺨﺶ( ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ‪) REC‬ﺿﺒﻂ( ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺴﺐ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ‪PLAY‬‬ ‫)ﭘﺨﺶ( ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 71‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 53
‫• ] [ )ﺣﺬﻑ( ﺭﻭﺵ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ] [ )ﺣﺬﻑ(‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﺏ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ] [ )ﺣﺬﻑ(‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺯﻳﺮ ”ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻋﻘﺐ“ ﺑﺮﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪ 3‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻨﻮ ‪ 3‬ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﻀﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻨﻮ ﮐﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 54
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) REC‬ﺿﺒﻂ(‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ )ﺗﻤﺮﮐﺰ(‬ ‫]‪) [r‬ﺿﺒﻂ(‬ ‫]‪[SET‬‬ ‫‪MENU‬‬ ‫ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ”ﺿﺒﻂ“‬ ‫‪(40‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺮﮐﺰ‬ ‫ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﻤﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻳﺎ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﮑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻳﺶ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺮﮐﺰ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺁﺭﺍﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 55
‫ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺮﮐﺰ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻮﺭی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺍی ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺭﻭی ﺁﻥ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺯﺭﺩ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ ]‪ [6‬ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﮐﻨﻮﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﻤﮏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎ ﺩﻭ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭی ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ‪ ١‬ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 56
‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻴﺪ )ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ(‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﮑﻪ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻔﻞ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ )‪ (AE‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﺴﺪﻭﺩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﮑﻞ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺮﮐﺰ )ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺮﮐﺰ(‬ ‫]‪) [r‬ﺿﺒﻂ(‬ ‫]‪[SET‬‬ ‫‪MENU‬‬ ‫ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ”ﺿﺒﻂ“‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺮﮐﺰ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺮﮐﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﭘﻨﺞ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻗﻠﺒﯽ ﻧﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﻫﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 57
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺗﻤﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ )ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ‪(AF‬‬ ‫]‪) [r‬ﺿﺒﻂ(‬ ‫]‪[SET‬‬ ‫‪MENU‬‬ ‫ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ”ﺿﺒﻂ“‬ ‫ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ‪AF‬‬ ‫‪ U‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﮐﻮﭼﮑﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﻗﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺑﯽ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪.(55‬‬ ‫‪ I‬ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﻧﻪ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺮﮐﺰ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺳﺒﺰ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 58
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﮐﻤﮑﯽ ﺗﻤﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ )ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﮐﻤﮑﯽ ‪(AF‬‬ ‫]‪) [r‬ﺿﺒﻂ(‬ ‫]‪[SET‬‬ ‫‪MENU‬‬ ‫ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ”ﺿﺒﻂ“‬ ‫ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﮐﻤﮑﯽ ‪AF‬‬ ‫ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﺟﻠﻮ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﺟﻠﻮﻳﯽ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻤﺮﮐﺰ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻢ ﻧﻮﺭ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﭘﺮﺗﺮﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ‬ ‫ﮐﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﺟﻠﻮی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 59
‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﻤﺮﮐﺰ ﻣﺮﮐﺰی ﺭﺍ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﻤﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﮐﺞ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﻴﻨﺠﺎﻣﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮ‪ ،‬ﻋﻴﻨﮏ ﺁﻓﺘﺎﺑﯽ‪ ،‬ﮐﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﭘﻮﺷﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻳﻪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﻧﻤﺎ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.
PAGE 60
‫ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭ ﺳﻮژﻩ )ﺿﺪ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ(‬ ‫]‪) [r‬ﺿﺒﻂ(‬ ‫]‪[SET‬‬ ‫‪MENU‬‬ ‫ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ”ﺿﺒﻂ“‬ ‫ﺿﺪ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﺗﺎﺭی ﻋﮑﺲ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻄﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﺭ ﮐﻢ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺁﻳﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺿﺪ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﻋﯽ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﯽ ‪ CCD‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺿﺪ ﺗﺎﺭی‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .
PAGE 61
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎی ]‪ [4‬ﻭ ]‪) [6‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ‪(L/R‬‬ ‫]‪) [r‬ﺿﺒﻂ(‬ ‫]‪[SET‬‬ ‫‪MENU‬‬ ‫ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ”ﺿﺒﻂ“‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ‪L/R‬‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎی ]‪ [4‬ﻭ ]‪ [6‬ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺟﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻳﯽ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫‪EV‬‬ ‫]‪[4]/[6‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﯽ‬ ‫‪EV‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫‪.(63‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪.(64‬‬ ‫‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ‪ ISO‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪.(66‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ*‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪.
PAGE 62
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﺁﻳﮑﻮﻥ )ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﺁﻳﮑﻮﻥ(‬ ‫]‪) [r‬ﺿﺒﻂ(‬ ‫‪MENU‬‬ ‫]‪[SET‬‬ ‫ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ”ﺿﺒﻂ“‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﺁﻳﮑﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﺁﻳﮑﻮﻥ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ‪) REC‬ﺿﺒﻂ(‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻣﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺁﻳﮑﻮﻥ ﻫﺎی ﺧﺎﺻﯽ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 63
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ(‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ )‪ T‬ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ )ﻋﮑﺲ ﻓﻮﺭی((‬ ‫]‪) [r‬ﺿﺒﻂ(‬ ‫]‪[SET‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪MENU‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ”ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ“‬ ‫‪ T‬ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ )ﻋﮑﺲ ﻓﻮﺭی(‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺏ‬ ‫ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩی‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩی‬ ‫• ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ”ﺧﻮﺏ“ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭﺧﺘﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﺮﺍﮐﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﮔﻬﺎی ﺍﻧﺒﻮﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﺡ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﭽﻴﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 64
‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫]‪ [SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺟﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺟﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﮑﻪ ﺁﻥ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﻪ ”‪ “0.0‬ﺑﺮﺳﺪ( ﺑﺎﻗﯽ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﺎﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺣﺘﯽ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺟﺒﺮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ‪ ،‬ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 65
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻧﻮﺭی‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺹ‬ ‫‪” 1‬ﺩﺳﺘﯽ“ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺭی ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻃﻮﺭی ﮐﻪ ﮐﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﮕﻴﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ [SET] 3‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺘﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﻫﻢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻗﯽ ﻣﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ‪.
PAGE 66
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ‪(ISO) ISO‬‬ ‫]‪) [r‬ﺿﺒﻂ(‬ ‫]‪[SET‬‬ ‫‪MENU‬‬ ‫ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ”ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ“‬ ‫‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ‪ ISO‬ﻳﮏ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻫﻴﭽﮑﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﺮ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ‪ ،‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 67
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫‪28‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪) [0] .٢‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ( ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‬ ‫]‪) [p‬ﭘﺨﺶ( ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﺯ ]‪ [6] ،[4‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺁﻳﮑﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫»‬ ‫ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻫﺎی ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫]‪[6] [4‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ‪/‬ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ‬ ‫• ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻫﺮ ﮐﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻋﻘﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.
PAGE 68
‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) PLAY‬ﭘﺨﺶ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ ]‪ [6‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻭﻗﺘﻴﮑﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺯﻭﻡ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ‪ ([) z‬ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ]‪ [4] ،[2] ،[8‬ﻭ ]‪ [6‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ‪ w‬ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 69
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ AV‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ )‪ (EMC-7A‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﺳﻔﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺻﺪﺍ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮ‬ ‫ﭘﻮﺭﺕ‬ ‫]‪[USB/AV‬‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ‪) AUDIO IN‬ﺳﻔﻴﺪ(‬ ‫‪AV‬‬ ‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ‪) VIDEO IN‬ﺯﺭﺩ(‬ ‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﻫﺎی ﻻﺯﻡ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 70
‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ DVD‬ﻳﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩک ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ AV‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭی‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ DVD‬ﻳﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩک ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮ‪ :‬ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ‪ VIDEO IN‬ﻭ ‪AUDIO IN‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ :‬ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ‪USB/AV‬‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﮏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ‪ DVD‬ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 71
‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﺨﺶ )ﭘﺨﺶ(‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی‬ ‫ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪) PLAY‬ﭘﺨﺶ(‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ]‪ [SET‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) PLAY‬ﭘﺨﺶ( ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪) PLAY‬ﭘﺨﺶ( ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺍی ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪) PLAY‬ﭘﺨﺶ(‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) PLAY‬ﭘﺨﺶ(‪ [SET] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪[SET‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪) PLAY‬ﭘﺨﺶ(‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪) PLAY‬ﭘﺨﺶ( ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 72
‫‪ à‬ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮی ‪) PLAY‬ﭘﺨﺶ( ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮی ‪) PLAY‬ﭘﺨﺶ( ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ ]‪ [6‬ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ ]‪ [2‬ﻣﻨﻮی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ]‪ [6‬ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ ]‪ [2‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪ [SET] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 73
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ )ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ(‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ ]‪ ،[2‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ”ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ“ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪) PLAY‬ﭘﺨﺶ( ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) PLAY‬ﭘﺨﺶ(‪ [SET] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ]‪ [SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪.(71‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 74
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﺰﺍﺣﻤﺖ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺍﻥ )ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﯽ ﺻﺪﺍ(‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﯽ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻓﻴﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﺰﺍﺣﻤﺖ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ ]‪ ،[2‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ”ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﯽ ﺻﺪﺍ“ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪) PLAY‬ﭘﺨﺶ( ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) PLAY‬ﭘﺨﺶ(‪ [SET] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ]‪ [SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪.(71‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ ]‪ [2‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ”ﺭﻭﺷﻦ“ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ]‪ [SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 75
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭼﺎپ )ﭼﺎپ ‪(DPOF‬‬ ‫]‪) [p‬ﭘﺨﺶ(‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫‪MENU‬‬ ‫]‪[SET‬‬ ‫ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ”ﭘﺨﺶ“‬ ‫ﭼﺎپ ‪DPOF‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 79‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺣﺬﻑ )ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ(‬ ‫]‪) [p‬ﭘﺨﺶ(‬ ‫]‪[SET‬‬ ‫‪MENU‬‬ ‫ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ”ﭘﺨﺶ“‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﺧﺎﺹ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺯ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ ]‪ [6‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺑﺮﺳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺯ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ ]‪ [2‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ”ﺭﻭﺷﻦ“ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻭ ]‪ [SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 76
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ )ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ(‬ ‫]‪) [p‬ﭘﺨﺶ(‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫]‪[SET‬‬ ‫‪MENU‬‬ ‫ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ”ﭘﺨﺶ“‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻅ ﺑﺎﻗﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.VGA ،5M ،10M :‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ‪ 3:2‬ﻳﺎ ‪ 16:9‬ﻋﮑﺴﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ ،4:3‬ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻋﮑﺴﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻳﮑﺴﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.
PAGE 77
‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ )ﺗﮑﺜﻴﺮ(‬ ‫]‪) [p‬ﭘﺨﺶ(‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫‪MENU‬‬ ‫]‪[SET‬‬ ‫ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ”ﭘﺨﺶ“‬ ‫ﺗﮑﺜﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﺪﺍی ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﻫﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍ ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻫﺮ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫]‪ [SET‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫]‪ [SET‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 78
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻫﺎی ﭘﺨﺶ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ‪/‬ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ‬ ‫]‪[6] [4‬‬ ‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬ ‫]‪[SET‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﺪﺍ‬ ‫]‪ [2‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫]‪ [2] [8‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍی ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ‫)‪[8] (DISP‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ‫]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ(‬ ‫• ﺻﺪﺍی ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺎ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺎ ‪ Windows Media Player‬ﻳﺎ ‪ QuickTime‬ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 79
‫ﭼﺎپ‬ ‫ﭼﺎپ ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺗﺨﺼﺼﯽ ﭼﺎپ*‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﺤﺘﻮی ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺗﺨﺼﺼﯽ ﭼﺎپ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﻭ ﭼﺎپ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭼﺎپ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ*‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﭼﺎپ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺷﮑﺎﻑ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮی‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭼﺎپ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺗﻨﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺯﺍﺭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭼﺎپ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 80
‫‪ .‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪ DPOF‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻫﺮ ﻋﮑﺲ ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪) [p‬ﭘﺨﺶ(‬ ‫ﭼﺎپ ‪DPOF‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬ ‫]‪[SET‬‬ ‫‪MENU‬‬ ‫ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ”ﭘﺨﺶ“‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ ]‪ [6‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭼﺎپ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ ]‪ [2‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﮐﭙﯽ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﺎ ‪ ٩٩‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻋﮑﺴﯽ ﺭﺍ ﭼﺎپ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ‪ ٠٠‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 81
‫‪ .‬ﻣﻬﺮﺯﻧﯽ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺩﺭ ﭼﺎپ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪.(79‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪ DPOF‬ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻬﺮﺯﻧﯽ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺭﺍ ﻫﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮐﻪ ﭼﺎپ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻃﻮﺭی ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻌﻀﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ ﻣﻬﺮ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺑﻘﻴﻪ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻬﺮﺯﻧﯽ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪.
PAGE 82
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪...‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﺠﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪) (USB‬ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪.(88 ،84‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻳﮏ ‪ LAN‬ﺑﯽ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )‪) (Eye-Fi‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪.(90‬‬ ‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻭ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﺁﻥ‬ ‫• ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪.
PAGE 83
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ‪Windows‬‬ ‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ‪ Windows‬ﮐﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭی ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ‬ ‫‪،Windows 7‬‬ ‫ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﺠﺎ‬ ‫‪Windows‬‬ ‫‪Vista‬‬ ‫ﻧﻴﺎﺯی ﺑﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪،‬‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫)‪Windows XP (SP3‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻧﻴﺎﺯی ﺑﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.
PAGE 84
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﻫﺎی ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺍﻥ ‪Windows‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯی ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺧﻮﺩﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ )ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﻢ(‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺻﻼﺡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺬﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 85
‫‪.۴‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭی ”‪) “Removable Disk‬ﺩﻳﺴﮏ ﺟﺪﺍﺷﺪﻧﯽ( ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ )ﻳﺎ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ( ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ ﺟﺪﺍﺷﺪﻧﯽ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.۵‬‬ ‫‪ .۶‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ﻣﻴﺎﻧﺒﺮی ﮐﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ”‪) “Copy‬ﮐﭙﯽ( ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٧‬ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺍﻥ ‪ :Windows Vista ،Windows 7‬ﺭﻭی ”‪) “Start‬ﺷﺮﻭﻉ( ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫ﺭﻭی ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ”‪ “DCIM‬ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫”‪) “Documents‬ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩ( ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 86
‫‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮐﭙﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺭﻭی ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺣﺎﻭی ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺭﻭی ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭی ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﮐﭙﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ”‪ “DCIM‬ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪” 93‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ“ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﮑﺴﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ )ﮐﻪ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ(‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 87
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﻫﺎی ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ ﺳﺨﺖ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬ ‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﭘﺨﺶ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺸﮑﻞ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺵ ﺯﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ”‪ “STD‬ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫– ‪ Windows Media Player‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺭﺗﻘﺎ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 88
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻭ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺻﻼﺡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺬﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺷﮑﺎﻝ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺟﺪی ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻗﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﮔﺮﮔﻮﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺻﻼﺡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺬﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻮﺩﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 89
‫‪.۵‬‬ ‫‪ .۶‬ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪) [ON/OFF‬ﻧﻴﺮﻭ( ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﮐﭙﯽ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻳﮑﻮﻥ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺳﻄﻞ ﺯﺑﺎﻟﻪ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﭘﺸﺘﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻣﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮐﭙﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺭﻭی ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ”‪ “DCIM‬ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺭﻭی ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺣﺎﻭی ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .۴‬ﺭﻭی ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 90
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﻫﺎی ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻫﺎی ‪ Macintosh‬ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺸﮑﻞ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺵ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ”‪ “STD‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫– ‪ QuickTime‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺭﺗﻘﺎ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺘﯽ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﺭ ‪ Macintosh‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ AV‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭی )‪ (EMC-7A‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻳﺎ ‪ Macintosh‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 91
‫• ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ‪ LAN‬ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻮﺍﭘﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﮐﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪.(95‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﺳﺒﺐ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ‪Eye-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺁﻥ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.
PAGE 92
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻫﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮐﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺑﻨﺪی ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻳﺎ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﯽ ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﯽ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ “ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ" )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ (93‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﻫﺮ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ‪ 9999‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ‪ CIMG0001‬ﺗﺎ‬ ‫‪ CIMG9999‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﺩ‪ .
PAGE 93
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺻﻞ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ )‪ (DCF‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ‪DCF‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ DCF‬ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﮐﻪ ‪ CASIO‬ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ DCF‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ DCF‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﭼﺎپ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 94
‫‪ .‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫• ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫• ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪DCF‬‬ ‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﯽ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ DCF‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﺪﺗﯽ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﺸﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﻫﺎی ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫• ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍی ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﮐﭙﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ‪ DCIM‬ﻭ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﮐﭙﯽ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 95
‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ )ﻧﺼﺐ(‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻨﻮ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) REC‬ﺿﺒﻂ( ﻭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) PLAY‬ﭘﺨﺶ( ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﻣﻨﻮی ‪) REC‬ﺿﺒﻂ( )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(52‬‬ ‫– ﻣﻨﻮی ‪) PLAY‬ﭘﺨﺶ( )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(71‬‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪(Eye-Fi) Eye-Fi‬‬ ‫]‪[SET‬‬ ‫‪MENU‬‬ ‫ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ”ﻧﺼﺐ“‬ ‫‪Eye-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪Eye-Fi‬‬ ‫”ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ“‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪.
PAGE 96
‫ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯی )ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯی(‬ ‫]‪[SET‬‬ ‫‪MENU‬‬ ‫ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ”ﻧﺼﺐ“‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯی‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺴﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ”ﺭﻭﺷﻦ“ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﮑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ]‪) [p‬ﭘﺨﺶ( ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯی ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻋﮑﺴﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯی ﺧﺎﺹ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 97
‫ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ )ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ(‬ ‫]‪[SET‬‬ ‫‪MENU‬‬ ‫ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ”ﻧﺼﺐ“‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻔﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﻳﺪ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺷﻬﺮ ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍﻳﺞ ﺩﺭ ‪ ١۶٢‬ﺷﻬﺮ ﺩﺭ ‪٣٢‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻘﻄﻪ ﺳﺮﺗﺎﺳﺮ ﺟﻬﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ ]‪” [2‬ﻣﻘﺼﺪ“ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ]‪ [6‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 98
‫ﻣﻬﺮﺯﻧﯽ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ )ﻣﻬﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ(‬ ‫]‪[SET‬‬ ‫‪MENU‬‬ ‫ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ”ﻧﺼﺐ“‬ ‫ﻣﻬﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻮﺭی ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻬﺮ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﻣﻬﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻫﺮ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺛﺒﺖ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻳﺎ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.
PAGE 99
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ )ﺷﮑﻞ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ(‬ ‫]‪[SET‬‬ ‫‪MENU‬‬ ‫ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ”ﻧﺼﺐ“‬ ‫ﺷﮑﻞ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ژﻭﺋﻴﻪ‪٢٠١۵ ،١٠ ،‬‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻝ‪/‬ﻣﺎﻩ‪/‬ﺭﻭﺯ‬ ‫‪15/7/10‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺯ‪/‬ﻣﺎﻩ‪/‬ﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪10/7/15‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎﻩ‪/‬ﺭﻭﺯ‪/‬ﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪7/10/15‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ )‪(Language‬‬ ‫]‪[SET‬‬ ‫‪MENU‬‬ ‫ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ”ﻧﺼﺐ“‬ ‫‪Language‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ “Language” 2‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 100
‫ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺷﯽ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ )ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺷﯽ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ(‬ ‫]‪[SET‬‬ ‫‪MENU‬‬ ‫ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ”ﻧﺼﺐ“‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺷﯽ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﺎﺭی ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺷﯽ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‪ ١ :‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‪ ٢ ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‪ ۵ ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ )ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) PLAY‬ﭘﺨﺶ( ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ‪ ۵‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪(.‬‬ ‫• ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺷﯽ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 101
‫ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ )‪ Ü‬ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ(‬ ‫]‪[SET‬‬ ‫‪MENU‬‬ ‫ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ”ﻧﺼﺐ“‬ ‫‪ Ü‬ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ] [ )ﺣﺬﻑ( ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻟﻴﮑﻪ ”‪ Ü‬ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ“ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺣﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ”ﺭﻭﺷﻦ“ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ”‪ Ü‬ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ“ ﺍﺯ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻧﺎﮔﻬﺎﻧﯽ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ (102‬ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﯽ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺮﺧﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ )”‪ Ü‬ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ“ ﺭﻭی ”ﺭﻭﺷﻦ“ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ(‪.
PAGE 102
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ )ﻓﺮﻣﺖ(‬ ‫]‪[SET‬‬ ‫‪MENU‬‬ ‫ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ”ﻧﺼﺐ“‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍی ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺟﺎﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍی ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﮐﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍی ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻴﺎﺯی ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 103
‫ﺿﻤﻴﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ‬ ‫*ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻄﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﯽ ﺗﻮﺟﻬﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﯽ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻧﮑﻨﺪ ﺧﻄﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺮگ ﻳﺎ ﺟﺮﺍﺣﺖ ﺟﺪی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫*ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻄﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﯽ ﺗﻮﺟﻬﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﯽ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻧﮑﻨﺪ ﺧﻄﺮ‬ ‫ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﮔﯽ ﻭﺩﺭ ﺑﻌﻀﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻴﺰﻳﮑﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ‬ ‫!‬ ‫‪$‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺧﻄﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺁﻥ )‪ (-‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .
PAGE 104
‫*ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﻓﻼﺵ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻧﻮﺭ‬ ‫• ﻫﻴﭽﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﮔﺎﺯ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻄﯽ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﻴﭽﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﮐﺴﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻧﻘﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻧﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻝ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻑ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 105
‫*ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺁﺏ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ‬ ‫• ﺁﺏ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ )ﺑﻪ ﺧﺼﻮﺹ ﻓﻠﺰﺍﺕ( ﺍﮔﺮ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺧﻄﺮ‬ ‫ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﻭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﮕﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﺮ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺎﻻ ﺭﺥ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻮﺭﺍ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻮﺍی ﺑﺎﺭﺍﻧﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﻓﯽ ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ ﺩﺭﻳﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺁﺏ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻤﺎﻡ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ‪ USB-AC‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 106
‫*ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺷﺮﺡ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﻋﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺧﻄﺮ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی‪ ،‬ﮔﺮﻣﺎی ﺑﻴﺶ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺏ ﻳﺎ ﺁﺏ ﻧﻤﮏ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﻣﯽ ﺑﻴﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺁﻥ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﯽ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ‪ CASIO‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .
PAGE 107
‫*ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ‪ USB-AC‬ﻭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻕ‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ‪ USB-AC‬ﻳﺎ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﻭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﮕﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻤﺎ ﺗﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﻫﻴﭽﮕﺎﻩ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ‪ USB-AC‬ﻳﺎ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻟﺤﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﭘﺘﻮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻧﭙﻮﺷﺎﻧﻴﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺎﺭ ﺑﺨﺎﺭی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﮔﺮﻣﺎ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺁﻥ ﮔﺮﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺭﺍ ﻧﮑﺸﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 108
‫*ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ‬ ‫• ﻫﻴﭽﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﻭ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﮕﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﻧﺎﭘﺎﻳﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫• ﻫﻴﭽﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﻧﺎﭘﺎﻳﺪﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻔﺴﻪ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﻔﺘﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺟﺮﺍﺣﺎﺕ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﻭﺭی ﮐﺮﺩ‬ ‫• ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 109
‫*ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﻴﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺷﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﻓﻼﺵ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻧﻮﺭ‬ ‫• ﻫﻴﭽﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻴﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺧﺼﻮﺹ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﭽﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺘﺮ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﺯ ﭼﺸﻢ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 110
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻬﻢ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﻫﺎی ﻻﺯﻡ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺟﺰﺍی ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﯽ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﮐﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.
PAGE 111
‫‪ .‬ﻟﻨﺰ‬ ‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩی ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻟﻨﺰ‬ ‫ﺧﺮﺍﺵ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ ﻣﺘﻮﺟﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺩﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﮐﻤﯽ ﺧﻤﻴﺪﮔﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺧﻄﻮﻃﯽ‬ ‫ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺻﺎﻑ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎی ﻟﻨﺰ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫• ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻳﺎ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺘﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 112
‫‪ .‬ﺣﻖ ﮐﭙﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺟﺰ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺍﺯ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺗﻌﻠﻖ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﺎﻟﮏ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮ ﻃﺒﻖ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺣﻖ ﮐﭙﯽ ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﻌﻀﯽ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻫﺎی ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﮐﻠﯽ ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻉ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﯽ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .
PAGE 113
‫ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺑﺮﻕ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﭘﺸﺘﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﺯﺩ‪...‬‬ ‫• ﺩﻣﺎی ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻣﺎی ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﻗﻄﻊ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﺮ ﺑﻤﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﻣﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﺜﻴﻒ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺎﺭﭼﻪ ﺍی ﺧﺸﮏ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪ USB‬ﺑﻪ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.
PAGE 114
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺸﻮﺭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻬﻢ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫• ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ‪ USB-AC‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻫﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ٢۴٠‬ﻭﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ‪۶٠/۵٠ ،‬‬ ‫ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺸﻮﺭ ﻭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ‪ USB-AC‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻔﺮ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺁژﺍﻧﺲ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺮﺗﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺼﻮﺹ‬ ‫ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻣﻨﺪﻳﻬﺎی ﺑﺮﻕ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺸﻮﺭ ﻣﻘﺼﺪ ﻣﺸﻮﺭﺕ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ‪ USB-AC‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺒﺪﻝ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 115
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﻫﺎی ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫• ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺧﺎﺻﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺁﻭﺭﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ‪ Ultra High-Speed‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ‪ Ultra High-Speed‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﺑﺮﺍی ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﺷﮑﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭ‪/‬ﻳﺎ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪ » ،‬ﻭ ‪ Y‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﻣﯽ ﺯﻧﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 116
‫ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ”ﻧﺼﺐ“‬ ‫‪Eye-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯی‪ :‬ﺻﺪﺍ ‪/ 1‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ‪ :‬ﺻﺪﺍ ‪/ 1‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‪ :‬ﺻﺪﺍ ‪/ 1‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‪ :‬ﺻﺪﺍ ‪/ 1‬‬ ‫= ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‪:‬‬ ‫‪/ ////...‬‬ ‫= ﭘﺨﺶ‪////... :‬‬ ‫ﺷﮑﻞ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪Language‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﺣﺖ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺷﯽ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‬ ‫‪REC‬‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯی‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬ ‫‪ Ü‬ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﻣﻬﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 117
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻫﻤﻪ ﭼﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﯽ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ‪...‬‬ ‫ﻋﻴﺐ ﻳﺎﺑﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﺷﮑﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺩﻻﻳﻞ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﯽ ﻭ ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩی‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺑﺮﻕ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (١‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﯽ ﺟﺎﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪.(13‬‬ ‫‪ (٢‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ .(14‬ﺍﮔﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻋﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﯽ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ ﮐﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻟﻴﺘﻴﻮﻡ ﻳﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ‪ CASIO NP-80‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺯﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 118
‫ﺍﺷﮑﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺩﻻﻳﻞ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﯽ ﻭ ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩی‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺭﻭی ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺑﯽ ﺭﻭی ﻋﮑﺲ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﮕﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺮﮐﺰ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (١‬ﺍﮔﺮ ? )ﻓﻼﺵ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ( ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪.(36‬‬ ‫‪ (٢‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪.
PAGE 119
‫ﺍﺷﮑﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺩﻻﻳﻞ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﯽ ﻭ ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩی‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ‪ (١‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻫﺮ ﭼﻪ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺘﺮ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪.(17‬‬ ‫‪ (٢‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ‬ ‫ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺗﺎ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻧﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻧﺮﺳﻴﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .
PAGE 120
‫ﺍﺷﮑﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺩﻻﻳﻞ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﯽ ﻭ ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩی‬ ‫ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺗﺎﺑﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻮﺭی ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻟﻨﺰ ﻧﺘﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎی ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﯽ ﻏﻴﺮ ‪ DCF‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﯽ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.
PAGE 121
‫ﺍﺷﮑﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺩﻻﻳﻞ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﯽ ﻭ ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩی‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﮑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (١‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺮﻳﺪ ﺁﻥ ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﻧﮑﺮﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺭﻫﺎ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪.(99 ،18‬‬ ‫‪ (٢‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺷﮑﺎﻟﯽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ .(102‬ﺳﭙﺲ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 122
‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ ‫‪ALERT‬‬ ‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﺩﻣﺎی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺗﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﺮ ﺑﻤﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺧﻨﮏ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻴﺮﻭی ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﺮﺍﺩ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺷﮑﺎﻟﯽ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺟﺎﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪.
PAGE 123
‫‪SYSTEM ERROR‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﺮﺍﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻭﺷﻨﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ‬ ‫‪ CASIO‬ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ‪) LOCK‬ﻗﻔﻞ( ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻫﺎی ‪ ،SDHC ،SD‬ﻳﺎ‬ ‫‪ SDXC‬ﺟﺎﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻗﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻋﮑﺴﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻴﭻ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﯽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻴﭻ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺟﺎﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .
PAGE 124
‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‪/‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪/‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻓﻮﺭی‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫)ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ(‬ ‫‪16M‬‬ ‫)‪(٣۴۵۶x۴۶٠٨‬‬ ‫‪3:2‬‬ ‫)‪(٣٠٧٢x۴۶٠٨‬‬ ‫‪16:9‬‬ ‫)‪(٢۵٩٢x۴۶٠٨‬‬ ‫‪10M‬‬ ‫)‪(٢٧٣۶x٣۶۴٨‬‬ ‫‪5M‬‬ ‫)‪(١٩٢٠x٢۵۶٠‬‬ ‫‪3M‬‬ ‫)‪(١۵٣۶x٢٠۴٨‬‬ ‫‪VGA‬‬ ‫)‪(۴٨٠x۶۴٠‬‬ ‫ﺿﻤﻴﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﯽ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ‪٢ SD‬‬ ‫*‬ ‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ‪١‬‬ ‫*‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺏ‬ ‫‪ ۵٫۵٧‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪٧‬‬ ‫‪٢٧٩١‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩی‬ ‫‪ ٣٫٧١‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪١١‬‬ ‫‪۴١٩١‬‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺏ‬ ‫‪ ۴٫٩٢‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪٨‬‬ ‫‪٣١۶٠‬‬ ‫ﻋ
PAGE 125
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ /‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﯽ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬ ‫)ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻗﺎﺏ(‬ ‫ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ )ﺻﺪﺍ(‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ‪١‬‬ ‫*‬ ‫‪HD‬‬ ‫‪٧٢٠x١٢٨٠‬‬ ‫)ﺗﮏ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ(‬ ‫‪STD‬‬ ‫‪۴٨٠x۶۴٠‬‬ ‫)ﺗﮏ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ(‬ ‫‪ ٣٠٫٢‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﻴﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬ ‫)‪ ٣٠‬ﻗﺎﺏ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ(‬ ‫‪ ١٠٫۶‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﻴﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬ ‫)‪ ٣٠‬ﻗﺎﺏ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ(‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﺍﻭﻡ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻫﺮ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫‪ ١ ٢ SD‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺍی‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪٣‬‬ ‫*‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ *‬ ‫‪۴‬‬ ‫‪ ١‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫‪ ۵‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‬ ‫‪ ٢٣‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬ ‫‪ ٢٢۶٫٣‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ ٢٨‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬ ‫‪ ٣‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫‪ ۶‬ﺩﻗ
PAGE 126
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻓﻮﺭی‪:‬‬ ‫‪(Exif Version 2.3) JPEG‬؛ ‪ DCF 2.
PAGE 127
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ )ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ(‪ ٢/١ :‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ٢٠٠٠/١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ )ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﺮﻏﻮﺏ(‪ ۴ :‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ٢٠٠٠/١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬ ‫• ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ ‫‪ (W) F3.0‬ﺗﺎ ‪) (W) F8.7‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ‪ ND‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ(‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻧﻮﺭی ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.
PAGE 128
‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﯽ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮی ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﯽ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎی ﻋﺎﺩی )‪ ٢٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﮔﺮﺍﺩ( ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻣﺎی ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.
PAGE 129
‫‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻟﻴﺘﻴﻮﻡ ﻳﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ )‪(NP-80‬‬ ‫ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ‬ ‫‪ ٣٫٧‬ﻭﻟﺖ‬ ‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻳﮑﯽ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ‬ ‫‪ ٧٠٠‬ﻣﻴﻠﯽ ﺁﻣﭙﺮﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﺩﻣﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩ‬ ‫‪ ٠‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ۴٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﮔﺮﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬ ‫‪) ٣١٫۴‬ﻃﻮﻝ( ‪) ٣٩٫۵ x‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( ‪) ۵٫٩ x‬ﻋﺮﺽ( ﻣﻴﻠﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﺯﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ‪ ١۵‬ﮔﺮﻡ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 130
CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.